Post on 24-Apr-2015
Michael Kloumlffer Active Global Support
July 2011
ALM 201
Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 2
Disclaimer
This presentation outlines our general product direction and should not be relied on in making a
purchase decision This presentation is not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement
with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this presentation or to
develop or release any functionality mentioned in this presentation This presentation and SAPs
strategy and possible future developments are subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any
time for any reason without notice This document is provided without a warranty of any kind either
express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a
particular purpose or non-infringement SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
document except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Agenda
SAP Solution Manager Landscape
bull Landscape Components
bull SLD LMDB
bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents
Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)
bull Post-Processing
Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
Lessons learned and more information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4
Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager
Run SAP
like a
Factory
Application
Lifecycle
Management
SingleSource of Truth
Integration
Validation
Solution Manager Landscape
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 2
Disclaimer
This presentation outlines our general product direction and should not be relied on in making a
purchase decision This presentation is not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement
with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this presentation or to
develop or release any functionality mentioned in this presentation This presentation and SAPs
strategy and possible future developments are subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any
time for any reason without notice This document is provided without a warranty of any kind either
express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a
particular purpose or non-infringement SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
document except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Agenda
SAP Solution Manager Landscape
bull Landscape Components
bull SLD LMDB
bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents
Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)
bull Post-Processing
Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
Lessons learned and more information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4
Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager
Run SAP
like a
Factory
Application
Lifecycle
Management
SingleSource of Truth
Integration
Validation
Solution Manager Landscape
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 3
Agenda
SAP Solution Manager Landscape
bull Landscape Components
bull SLD LMDB
bull Diagnostics Agents amp SAP Host Agents
Upgrade of SAP Solution Manager
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
bull Performing the Upgrade (or New Installation)
bull Post-Processing
Performing Post-Upgrade Configuration
bull Roadmap
bull Preparation
Lessons learned and more information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4
Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager
Run SAP
like a
Factory
Application
Lifecycle
Management
SingleSource of Truth
Integration
Validation
Solution Manager Landscape
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 4
Orchestrate Your Solution with SAP Solution Manager
Run SAP
like a
Factory
Application
Lifecycle
Management
SingleSource of Truth
Integration
Validation
Solution Manager Landscape
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
Solution Manager Landscape
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 6
Solution Manager Landscape Components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Managed System 1
ERP
Managed System 2
Enterprise Portal
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 7
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Client PC
Client PC Components
Access to the Solution Manager with
Browser (Internet Explorerhellip)
SAPGui
NetWeaver Business Client
For the different applications some plugin
components are needed
Microsoft Silverlight (for Introscope WebView)
Adobe Flash
Java Runtime Environment
BMC Appsight BlackBox
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 8
SAP Solution Manager
Components on the Managing System
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
LMDB SMSYSolar
Directory
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managing system components
SAP Solution Manager 71
Is a dual stack system (ABAP amp J2EE)
Includes SAP Business Warehouse
Includes CRM 70
Includes a license for CA Wily Introscope
Uses SLD amp LMDB for landscape data maintenance
Possible sizing options
Installation of SAP BW on separate host
Installation of Wily Introscope Enterprise Manager on
separate host
Sizing of Wily Introscope with Manager of Manager
Concept
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 9
SAP Solution Manager
Components On Managed System
Managed System
Diagnostics Agent
SAP Host Agent
J2EE
IS BC
Agent
ABAP
Local
SLD
Central SLD
Wily Host
Agent
J2EE
Command
Console
OS
Command
Console
ST-PI
ST-API
(Extractors)
Managed system components
Managed System
Can be any kind of SAP non-SAP system
Can include a local SLD (eg Process Integration)
Depending on system type (ABAPJavahellip) different agents and plugins
are needed
Agents amp Plugins
One Diagnostics Agent per virtual host
Agent applications are managed centrally from Sap Solution Manager system
One SAP Host Agent per physical host
For ABAP systems the plugins need to be installed depending on the
managed system product (ST-PI and ST-API)
For J2EE Java and Net systems the CA Wily Introscope Byte Code
Agent needs to be deployed (can be done from SAP Solution Manager)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 10
Logical Landscape View
SAP Solution Manager 71
SAP
Business
Warehouse
CA Wily
Introscope
Solar
DirectorySMSY LMDB
Workcenter
Data Stores
Repositories
Engines
Applications
EFWK CTS+ hellip
RCAService
DeskChaRM hellip
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
Managed System
Diagnostics
Agent
SLD
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 11
SAP Solution Manager 71
SLD amp LMDB
Solution Manager 71
Local SLD
(use optional)
Central SLD
SMSY LMDB
LMDB implications in 71
Flexible landscape database based on the CIM
data model
No local SLD required anymore but supported
Full synchronization between Landscape SLDrsquos
and LMDB
Automatic data migration from SMSY to LMDB in
the 71 upgrade where needed for the respective
Solution Manager scenarios
With 71 SP1 (Ramp-Up Version) the source of
technical systems is moved to LMDB
It is planned to move product systems and logical
componentsMigration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 12
SAP Solution Manager 71
Outside Discovery amp LMDB
Host B
Host A
DB
IIS
Virt Host A1
Virt Host B1
SolMan Host
SLD
OS Info
OS Info
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent
SAP Host Agent
Enhances available landscape information in LMDB in SAP Solution
Manager
Support also products where no SLD data supplier is available eg
Databases amp Operating Systems
Microsoft components
Is aware of virtualization through information from SAP Host Agent
Works completely automatic with Diagnostics Agents
SAP Solution Manager 71
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 13
Landscape scenariosWhere to install an agent
PhyHost2 PhyHost3
VHost1 VHost2VHost3
PhyHost1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
cluster
1 diagnostics agent per managed lsquohostrsquo
represented by a name physical or virtual
1 SAP HostAgent per physical host
1 agent per host supports several managed
systems running on the same named host
C7 C8
Diagnostics Agent
Managed ComponentSAP Solution Manager
SAP HostAgent
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 1
SAP Host Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 2
Diagnostics
Agent 4
Diagnostics
Agent 3
SAP Host
Agent
Diagnostics
Agent 5
H
D1
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 14
Using a direct connection to the
message server
No additional configuration steps
necessary
Is primarily targeted for manual rollout
in small landscapes
Agent can be installed and connection
is available instantaneous
Connecting Agents to the Solution ManagerAvailable connection options
Using the SLD connection
(Agent Candidate Management)
Agent can be installed without having
access or credentials to the Solution
Manager system
Agent can be provided with new
connection data even when not
connected to the Solution Manager
system
Standard when agent is installed
together with SAP NetWeaver based
product
Connecting the agent to the Solution
Manager system can take up to 30
minutes
Recommendation Connect the agent during
the installation directly to the Solution
Manager but also enable the registration in
SLD to be able to use the extended
connection features (available with
Diagnostics Agent 720)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 15
Required Agent Versions
Diagnostic Agent
bull You can use any version of the Diagnostics Agent (already installed agents do not need to be updated)
bull The agent applications are updated automatically from the Solution Manager
bull For new installations use the latest available version of the diagnostics agent from
httpservicesapcomswdc Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP SOLUTION
MANAGER SAP SOLUTION MANAGER 71 Agents for managed systems
SAP Host Agent
bull You need to install at least patch level 68 of the SAP Host Agent 720
bull The installation files are available from httpservicesapcomswdc Support Packages and Patches
Browse Download Catalog SAP Technology Components SAP HOST AGENT SAP HOST AGENT 720
bull This is installation procedure is described in SAP Note 1031096
It is recommended to enable the automatic update feature of the SAP
Host Agent so that you can update the Host Agent centrally This is
described in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 16
Auto update SAP Host Agent
Automatic Upgrade Process for SAP
HostAgent
1 Host Agent checks regularly in the
subdirectory NEW for a new version
2 Directory can be linked (symbolic links) to a
central file store
3 New SAPHostAgent SAR can be deployed
to the central share
4 If new installation files are detected in the
update directory the agent upgrades itself
and restarts
SAP Host Agent
usrsaphostctrlNEW
Regular Check for new
installation files
Central File Share per OS
Unpacked
SAPHOSTAGENTSAR
SymLink
More information on the
automatic update are provided
in SAP Note 1473974
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 17
70 701 SR1 711 720 702 730
Integrated in NW DVDrsquos Yes Yes Yes Yes
Standalone Version available No Yes Yes Yes
JVM JDK 142 SAPJVM SAPJVM SAPJVM
Default System ID Instance SMD J98 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97 DAA SMDA97
Support for SLD amp direct connection
(simultaneously)No No Yes
Yes (support offline
mode)
SSL Support No No Yes Yes
SAProuter Support No No Yes Yes
SAP Host Agent needed
Yes (manual install)(Except for SolMan prior
to 70EhP1 SP20 using
local saposcolbinary)
Yes (manual install) Yes (auto install)Yes (auto installed
updated)
Installation Note 1357812 1234387 1368413 1448655
Differences of the available Diagnostics Agent Versions
Recommended
for new installations
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 18
Typical Agent Layout
SAP Solution Manager Host
SAP Solution
Manager 71Wily
Introscope
Enterprise
Manager
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
SLD Host
SLD
J2EE
ABAP
Managed System Phyiscal Host 1
VHost1 VHost2
Enterprise Portal ERP
DAA 98
SAP Host
Agent
IS BC
Agent
DAB 99
IS Host Adapter IS Host Adapter
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
Upgrade of SAP Solution
Manager
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 20
Preparing for InstallationUpgrade
Installation How Upgrade
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systemsMaster Guide
Plan implementation of missing software components agent and
possible restarts for managed systems
Plan user amp port availability Security Guide Plan user amp port availability
Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71 Sizing Guide Check hardware prerequisites for SAP Solution Manager 71
Obtain the Installation Software
DVDrsquos or
servicesapcomsw
dc
Obtain the Upgrade Software
Install SAP Solution Manager including support package update Inst Upgr Guides Upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 71
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Connect managed systems to SLDSWDC SDN
Update SLD Content to latest available version
Check the connection of managed systems to SLD
Install Diagnostics agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed systems Inst GuidesInstall Diagnostics Agent and SAP HostAgent on all managed
systems
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
servicesapcomsw
dc
Implement missinglatest software requirement on managed systems
(ST-API amp ST-PI)
Install Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
servicesapcomsw
dc + Guides
Upgrade Introscope Enterprise Manager
Install Diagnostics Agent and Host Agent on all Enterprise Manager
hosts
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
SOLMAN_SETUP
+ add guides
Perform configuration of SAP Solution Manager and managed
systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 21
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for all
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 22
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wiliy IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install
Diagnostics
Agent for DB
host and Wily
Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 23
Hardware pre-requisitesSizing Tool kit
SAP Solution Manager sizing Toolkit provides information on infrastructure requirements including
SAPs Memory Databases and Disk Spaces needed to implement selected ALM scenarios for a set of
Managed Systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 25
Check Prerequesites
Update SLD CR Content amp Model
LMDB requires some minimun version of the CR Content and the model installed in at least one
connected SLD
bull CR Content latest available
bull Model Version minimum 1616 better latest available
To check open SLD
httpsldhostsldportsld
Go to Administration Details Data
Check Note 669669 for further
information on CR Content amp Model
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 26
Installation amp Upgrade
Where To Find The Software
httpsservicesapcomswdc
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 27
SAP Solution Manager 71
Installationupgrade roadmap
Implement Pre-requisitesImplement missing software on
managed systems
Install Solution
Manager
Upgrade Solution
Manager Including
Wily IS EM
Download software from SMP
Perform Delta
Configuration with
Solman_setup
Repeat managed
Systems
configuration for PI
systems
Preparation
Upgrade Installation
Post Processing
Upgrade
SAPHostAgent on
all managed hosts
Install Diagnostics
Agent for DB host
and Wily Hosts
Perform Backup
Run Self-Diagnosis
Perform Basic
Configuration with
Solman_Setup
Install Wily IS EM
Install Diagnostics
Agent for All
managed Hosts
Perform managed
Systems
configuration with
SolMan_Setup
Install Diagnostics
Agent on Wily Hosts
Restart Java
Managed systems
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 28
Upgrade UI ndash Combined ABAP amp Java Upgrade
Java ABAP
upgrade runs in
parallel
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 29
Upgrade Process Steps Details
Initialization
bull The upgrade program analyzes your SAP system On the upgrade GUI you always see the Monitor tab page and both the ABAP and the J2EE tab page
Extraction
bull The required software is extracted
Configuration
bull In the Configuration roadmap step you enter all the information required for the upgrade process This includes the passwords the preconfiguration
mode information about software units add-ons and Support Packages that you want to include information about the shadow system and location to
the enhancement package configuration file
Checks
bull The upgrade program checks if the operating system and database version of your source release match the requirements of the target release It also
checks some application-specific requirements
Preprocessing
bull In the Preprocessing roadmap step the upgrade program creates the shadow system This roadmap step requires only few user entries The runtime of
this roadmap step depends on the preconfiguration mode you have chosen With preconfiguration mode low resource use the Preprocessing roadmap
step is rather short since the import of the substitution tables and the shadow system operation both happen during the downtime With preconfiguration
modes standard resource use and high resource use both the substitution table import and the shadow system operation start during the
Preprocessing roadmap step When the Preprocessing roadmap step is finished and you choose Next the downtime starts
Downtime
bull The Downtime roadmap step runs without any user interaction The switch to the new system takes place in this roadmap step The upgrade program
converts application tables and data to match the target release layout In addition it switches the SAP kernel
Postprocessing
bull The upgrade program creates the upgrade evaluation saves the log files and prompts you to start with certain follow-up activities
Finalization
bull The upgrade program removes files and directories that are no longer required and completes the upgrade
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 30
Installation
Installation is based on SAPinst
1 Download DVDrsquos from SAP Marketplace or use latest available version in SAP CD Manager
2 Unpack all DVDrsquos to local drives on SAP Solution Manager system
3 Start SAPinst and follow the procedure
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
Performing Post-Upgrade
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 32
SAP Solution Manager Configuration with SOLMAN_SETUP
SAP Solution Manager 71 is configured using an Automatic Basic Configuration
Accessible via transaction code SOLMAN_SETUP
Allows an easy fast and step-by-step configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Single easy to use wizard for system
preparation amp basic configuration
Highly automated configuration
Integrated documentation for each step
Easy access to open tasks and postponed
activities
Configuration of all managed systems
from one central entry point
Configuration of other scenarios like
Technical Monitoring Data Volume
Managementhellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 33
Automatic Basic Configuration UI components
Help Section
Provides detailed information to
each step such as what needs to
be done and what will happen in
the background
Activities
Lists all single activities during
each step along with the
documentation for the IMG activity
Log
Shows detailed logs per activity
Navigation
Guided procedure with all steps for
the basic configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 34
Automatic Basic Configuration Configuration Roadmap
Prepares the system for the configuration
Needs to be performed fully after a new installation
After patches and upgrades needed to update dialog and system users and assign the
appropriate default roles and to implement the appropriate Central Correction Note (CCN)
System
Preparation
Configures the basic scenarios in SAP Solution Manager (Service Delivery Issue Management
Early Watch Alerts Maintenance Optimizer Root Cause Analysis hellip)
Needs to be performed after new installations and after support packages to perform delta
configuration
Overview screen tells you which configuration needs update
Basic
Configuration
Connection and configuration of managed systems
Sets up SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics to perform Root Cause Analysis on SAP
Solution Manager
Creation of Logical Components for managed systems
Managed
Systems
Configuration
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 35
SAP Solution Manager ConfigurationOverview Screen
The overview shows the status of the SAP Solution Manager configuration
Which steps of the configuration have been performed when and by whom
Which steps of the configuration needs an update
Check bdquoUpdate Needed
Flagldquo to see which activities
need to be reperformed
after a SP update
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 36
The new roadmaphellip
hellipprovides detailed status information for each step of a guided configuration scenario So you can
decide if a step has been performed successfully or if a reconfiguration is needed for a complete
procedure
Step was performed
successfully
Step was performed
with errors (check
and reexecution
needed)
Step was performed
with warnings
(check needed)
Step needs reexecution
because of changes in the
system (SP Update
configuration changeshellip)
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 37
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
System preparation New steps in 71
Automatic
Central
Correction
Note Check
Configuration
of needed
WebServices
Configuration
SLD amp LMDB
Connect SMD
agents to
Solution
Manager
Install and
configure
SAHostAgent
Configure
LMDB
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 38
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Basic Configuration New steps in 71
CUA Support for
all users
Support for Introscope
Installation over
Diagnostics Agent amp
Introscope User
Management
Configuration of
MailSMS for
Solution Manager
notification
95 of steps
(incl BI) are
now
automated
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 39
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71Support for all technical system
types (incl selected 3rd party like
Websphere)
Technical Scenarios (multiple
systems like double stacks)
And standalone databases
Detailed Status overview
- RFC working
- Configuration status
- System well defined
- ST-API amp PI checks
Integration of LMDB
Technical System
maintenance
ABAPJAVA double stack
scenario are automatically
created
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 40
SAP Solution Manager Configuration
Managed Systems Configuration New steps in 71
Create and
check RFCs for
Managed
Systems
Assign SMD
Agents to Server
Name
All Users
managed by the
Wizard
CTS+ and DBA
cockpit support
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 41
Upgrading to the new IT Service Management
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 42
Standard Process after Upgrade for IT Service Management
If the customer used only standard functionality
with standard customizing no manual upgrade
effort needed new customizing is delivered for
new transaction types
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 43
New Guided Procedures for configuration of IT Service
Management in SolMan Setup
Copy of
transaction types
now automated in
SAP Solution
Manager 71 SP3
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
Lessons learned and more
information
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 45
Leasons learned from the Customer Validation Beta Projects amp
RampUp
Start Landscape Planning early
Prepare a tracking list of managed systems
Get the users and connections opened with the customer before the project starts
Check SLD quality and SW components of the managed systems
Import the latest SLD content in SLD before starting the configuration
Ensure Diagnostics Agents and SAP Host Agent availability before starting
Check profile parameters after installation upgrade
On Oracle DBrsquoS Update the DB statistics
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 46
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUPHome
Up to date information on setup and configuration
for SAP Solution Manager 71
bull Landscape Setup
bull SLD LMDB
bull Configuration Procedures
bull Troubleshooting Guides
bull hellip
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
copy 2011 SAP AG All rights reserved 47
Additional Information
Application Lifecycle Management with SAP Solution Manager
httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager
SolMan_Setup Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMSETUP
Solution Manager Authorizations Wiki in SDN
httpwikisdnsapcomwikidisplaySMAUTH
Guides for SAP Solution Manager (Master Guide Installation Guides Upgrade Guides Security
Guides Sizing Toolkit hellip)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAP Solution Manager Release 71
Where to get the softwarehttpservicesapcomswdc Installation amp Upgrades A-Z Index SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager 71
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom
Thank You
Contact information
Michael Kloumlffer
Service Architect
MichaelKloeffersapcom